Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project.

2 .

and piping. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. electrical panels. Add more detailed modelling elements. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. such as mechanical equipment. Add basic MEP elements. 3 .Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. and plumbing fixtures. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Germany. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. and plumbing engineering workflows. fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as duct. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.

Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. After completing each exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. templates. NOTE Depending on your installation.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. you can choose to save your work. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Create detail views. When you open a training file. However. when you add ductwork. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. you learn where the training files are located. For example. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. For example. annotations. to provide a richer and more finished design. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. such as templates and families. as well as how to open and save them. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. is located and accessed in the training files location. In this exercise. Contact your CAD manager for more information. When you install the training files as instructed. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. On the Contents tab. So. and sheets to document the project. however. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. You do not design entire systems. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. your Training folder may be in a different location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Create schedules. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. views. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. and tags.

scroll down. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. select the folder in which to save the new file. For example. You may close the file with or without saving changes. if you open settings. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option.rvt. and click the Training Files icon. and click Save. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. double-click Imperial or Metric. 4 Click the training file name. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. enter the new file name. and click Open. verify that Project Files (*. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 8 If you have made changes. a list of file types displays. For File name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. For Files of type. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 3 In the right pane. the Open dialog displays. and you can open any supported file type.rvt) is selected. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt and make changes. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. you are prompted to save the changes. click ➤ Save As. Accessing Training Files | 5 . NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file.

6 .

the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. and plans. As you work in drawing and schedule views. drawing sheets. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the parameter is one of association or connection. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. You learn the terminology. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the hierarchy of elements. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. If the length of the elevation is changed. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. scope. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In the Revit MEP model. and phases when you need it. 2D and 3D view. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. ■ ■ 7 . the floor or roof remains connected. the operation of the software is parametric. and schedules required for a building project. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. every drawing sheet. the door retains this relationship to the partition. If you move the partition. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. sections. hence. In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. In this case. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. drawings. quantities. schedules.

and keynotes are annotation elements. and reference planes are datum elements. levels. For example. For example. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. sinks. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. dimensions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. boilers. sprinklers. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . filled regions. sinks. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. and 2D detail components. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and electrical panels. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. For example. Examples include detail lines. boilers. ducts. They help to describe or document the design. and electrical panels. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. walls and ceilings are hosts. Datum elements help to define project context. They display in relevant views of the design. dimensions. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. tags. For example. grids. sprinklers.

you do nothing to establish these relationships. views of the project. In Revit MEP. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. If you can draw. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. and drawings of the design. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. elevation views. This information includes components used to design the model. families. section views. By using a single project file. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. first floor. and so forth). Often. for example. In other cases. such as roofs. North . and ceilings. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. programming is not required. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. Project: In Revit MEP. and types. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. For example. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. However. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . To place levels. or bottom of foundation. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. from geometry to construction data. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. Most often. you must be in a section or elevation view. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. The project file contains all information for the building design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. you can explicitly control them. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. top of wall. schedules. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. floors. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers.

Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. and similar graphical representation. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. A type can be a specific size of a family. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. System families can be transferred between projects. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. and wires. showing. You can also display several project views at one time. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Unlike system and standard component families. For example. or layer the views to see only the one on top. each in-place family contains only a single type. hiding. With a few clicks. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. pipes. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. identical use. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. Then experiment with them. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. For example. Type: Each family can have several types. For example. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. such as a A0 title block. System families include ducts. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). A type can also be a style. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. However. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types.

Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To return the panel to the ribbon. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels.

many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. project and system parameters. select the tool first.. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. architect-specific tools.. and CAD files. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and settings. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . tools used for running analysis on the current design. tools used for editing existing elements. data and systems. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. When working on the Modify tab. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. then select what you want to modify. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and for switching views.

Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . when adding duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. For example. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. closes the application menu (double-click). provides access to common tools. To keep a panel expanded. By default. provides requested information. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays frequently used tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Export) On the application menu.. (Save As) export the current drawing. click. (Open) save the current drawing.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. select a file to open.. such as Export and Publish. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . select a template and create a new drawing...

click. or template file. and Walkthrough. annotation.. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. To enable or disable a tool item. provides views including Default 3D. or template file. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Licensing) close the file.On the application menu. family. Camera. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. (Print) access product and license information. but is not enabled by default.. to... (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . saves a current project. annotation. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. publish the current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. family.

Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. To show the Status Bar again. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Clipboard. or the Family Editor. Starting with the most recent command. Clear the Status Bar check mark. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. However. When you are using a command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). In addition. workshared components. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. when you switch to another editing mode. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . check the Status Bar. When you are highlighting an element or component. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. To hide the Status Bar. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. repeat the command. This displays the command history in a list. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Modify. displaying the same information. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting.To undo or redo a series of operations. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group.

To change existing elements to a different type. click (Modify). Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. On the Quick Access toolbar. When you place an element in a drawing. select one or more elements of the same category.To cancel or exit the current command. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. for example. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Place a Wall.

click Training Files. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. 1 Click ➤ Open. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. In the following steps. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Zoom the view In the tutorials. There are several ways to access zoom options. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu.

on the Navigation bar. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Modifying the View | 19 . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. To modify or add snap increments. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). In the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area. the view zooms in on the selected area. click . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. 9 To display SteeringWheels. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar.

and click tin the Options dialog. To define settings for SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. click the SteeringWheels tab. and then using the Zoom tool again. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. Click and drag to orbit the design. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. 14 To exit the wheel. press ESC. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool.

Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. called drag controls. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Small blue dots. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. After you are familiar with these tasks. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. bottoms. display along the ends. Similar controls. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. referred to as shape handles.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct.HVAC Plan . Performing Common Tasks | 21 . and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. These are the drag controls. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. 2 Enter ZR. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. and select the duct. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials.Design. as shown.

NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . or press CTRL+Z. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. click the Undo command. Move. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. In this example. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. on the Standard toolbar.

10 Move the cursor to the right. such as Move and Copy. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. for example. as shown. and drag it to the left as shown. After selecting the element to move. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case. you want to move the duct. The duct is moved to the new position.Some commands. click to specify the starting position. 11 With the duct already selected. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

For example. Select Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 14 Enter VG.Supply. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 13 To end a command. Press ESC twice. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. Click OK. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. such as the Modify Ducts command.Return. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .End a command Some commands. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

and geometry from the starting template. such as coordination review and interference checking. you learn how to start a project from a template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open North. 27 . system families. You can choose from several templates. Finally. link files. create and manage views. You can either select a template from the template library. and open Metric ➤ Templates. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and click Open. and modify system settings. click Training files. use copy/monitor. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. the default building levels and standard views. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. settings. 7 In the Project Browser. New projects inherit all the families. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. such as ducts and pipes. In that case. under Create new. 5 In the New Project dialog. and loadable families. select Project. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog. 6 Click OK. under Template file.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). such as the default project units and settings.rte template.

and select the Systems-Default_Metric. select Project template. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Click OK. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects.rte template and click Open. ■ For Building Construction. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . ■ ■ Under Create new. For example. 10 Using the same method. for City. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Click OK twice. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. select School or University. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. create another new project using the Construction template. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. click Edit. For Location.8 In the drawing area. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. click Browse. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. Click Cancel. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. NH. If you want to use a template other than the default. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. under Energy Analysis. select Manchester. for Energy Data. (Browse). When you select the material. click (Browse). Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. navigate to Metric Templates. select Level 1. In the Choose Template dialog. review the construction materials listed. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select it now. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog.

click Rectangular. under Pipe Settings. 27 Click OK. click Round. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. for 20. for 90.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . After standard settings have been established for an organization. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected.000 mm. 140. select Identity Data. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 24 In the right pane. click Sizes. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. and 140. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. and demand factors for electrical systems. and 310. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts.00 mm.00 mm.00 mm. 290. piping. plumbing. and fire protection systems. 25 In the left pane. for 90.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. Holding CTRL. Click OK twice. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.00 mm. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 260. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog.00 mm. click Wiring. For Categories. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. wiring. 22 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane.00 mm. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 110. under Duct Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 26 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 33 Click OK. under Duct Settings.rfa and click Open. select Views. 110.

3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. sheets. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. In addition. For Then by.rvt.Origin to Origin. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. click Training. select View Name. 4 In the New Project dialog. select Project. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Click Open. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Sub-Discipline. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. families. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 5 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Browse. For Then by. You need to create the MEP model for the project. and groups that are contained in a project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m. select Associated Level. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 38 Close the file. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. For Sort by. under Template file. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. under Create new. select Auto . From the Positioning list. select Family and Type.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. To enable this coordination. Linking Projects In this exercise.

select the linked architectural model. under Constraints. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 If necessary. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. 12 Click OK. Linking Projects | 31 . select Room Bounding. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area.Mech.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North .

19 On the left side of the view. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model.Floor. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. click Plan View types. click the level line for 03.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 17 On the Options Bar.

of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. Linking Projects | 33 . and that the copied elements are monitored. After copying. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. click By Host View. for the link file. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 34 On the Basics tab. appears above the copied elements. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. a warning message displays. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. and the level 4. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. indicating that an element has changed. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. highlight the linked model. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. and click to select the linked model. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. If you modify a monitored element. select Custom. level 3. indicating that a relationship is established. click Custom.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. warnings notify you of any violations. 29 In the drawing area. and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. 27 In the drawing area. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed.

Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. Select Show categories from all disciplines. select Custom.Mechanical and click Apply View Template. for the link file. Roads. deselect Parking. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. 5 On the Basics tab.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. 2 In the New View Template dialog. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 7 Click OK twice. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Planting. Under Visibility. click Edit. Site. Under Visibility. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. under View Properties. Click OK. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . deselect Levels. Click OK. 36 Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. click Custom. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. for Name. for V/G Overrides RVT Links. and Topography. 3 In the View templates dialog. enter Mechanical View and click OK. click Custom.

journal cleanup options. These settings control the graphics. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. under View Templates. click the Graphics tab. 7 Click OK. select Mechanical and click OK. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. Modifying System Settings In this exercise. and click OK. 8 Click ➤ Options. 9 In the Options dialog. 5 In the New Project dialog. 2 In the Options dialog. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.rte. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. selection default options. Notice that the drawing area is black. and your username when using worksharing. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. click Training Files. click the Graphics tab.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. select Invert background color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. they are not saved to project files or template files. under Template file. 3 Under Colors. Modifying System Settings | 35 . System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Browse. notification preferences.

18 Select the wall. 14 Click OK. and click OK. 19 Press ESC to end the command. When an error occurs. For Tooltip assistance. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. click the File Locations tab. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. However. the elements causing the error display using this color. including your default project template. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Close the file without saving it. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it.10 Under Colors. select One hour. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 2 In the Options dialog. 12 Click the General tab. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. select yellow. click the value for Selection color. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. and family libraries. select None. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. family template files. you specify default file locations. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 13 Under Notifications. 11 In the Color dialog. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. You can modify the existing library names and path. 7 In the Options dialog. and click Open. 10 In the Places dialog. In the following illustration. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. under Default path for family template files. and you can create new libraries. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files. saving. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. Specifying File Locations | 37 . such as in a large.3 Under Default template file. select the folder to save your files to by default. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. ➤ New ➤ Project. When you are opening. This path is set automatically during the installation process. Load. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Browse. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Click and click Browse to select a template. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. or loading a Revit MEP file. Save. centralized. TIP To view a template. click Browse. note the list of library names. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. 8 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. click Places. and Import dialogs. However. These are the family templates that you use to create new families.

The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .11 In the Places dialog. Save. and change the name to My Library. and Import dialogs. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. and select it as the library path. ➤ Open. click the My Library icon. click My Library. click (Add Value). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click Open. 15 Under Library Name. Load. and click (Browse). templates. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click OK twice. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. or families.

5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 12 Create a new project using the default template. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 11 In the Options dialog.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 9 In the text editor. click Edit. 22 Select My Library. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Spelling tab. 19 Click Cancel. click Places. click OK. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. view the current path. This path is determined during installation. click Edit. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. select Ignore words in uppercase. 2 In the Options dialog. If you work in a large office. and decal image files. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. specify the new location here. If you want to relocate this path. 20 Click ➤ Options. 3 Under Settings. custom color files. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 21 On the File Locations tab. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. such as bump maps. 27 Click OK. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP.

2 In the New Project dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 18 Click ➤ Options. 24 In the Options dialog. 6 In the Snaps dialog. click the Spelling tab. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 23 In the text editor. click Browse. click Close. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Edit. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. under Dimension Snaps. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte. As you zoom in and out within a view. click File menu ➤ Save. 21 Under Personal dictionary. click OK. work with snapping turned off. and enter 500 . The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. you modify snap increments. 20 Under Settings. 19 In the Options dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.. under Template file.17 In the Spelling dialog. You can turn snap settings on and off. click Restore Defaults. you modify snap settings. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 25 Close the file without saving it. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . In this exercise. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 4 In the New Project dialog. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click Training Files. click OK. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. 22 In the text editor.

For example. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. enter SM. 10 On the Options Bar. use the wheel button on your mouse. This is the increment that you added previously. click OK. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area.7 Under Object Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. 8 In the Snaps dialog. zoom out until it does so. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. If you do not have a wheel button. and move the cursor to the right. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. deselect Chain. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. If it does not. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. snapping reverts to the system default settings.

17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 26 Close the file. 22 Move the cursor downward. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. and delete the value 500 . 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. it will snap to the endpoints. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 25 Click OK. 19 Enter SM. If you move the cursor along the wall. and move the cursor to the right. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. the midpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. with or without saving it. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. Do not set the wall end point. Notice that snapping is once again active. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and specify the wall endpoint.. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

At the end of the tutorial. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will understand the process. As you create the mechanical system. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you can choose to save your work. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. methodology. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. you first configure the linked architectural model. In this exercise. In this lesson. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. you first plan the system. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. This system consists of a cooling tower. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. 45 . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. By following the recommended workflow. After applying a color scheme to the zones. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. and then you create a plenum level. After finishing each exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.autodesk. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. go to http://www. water source heat pump (WSHP). NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. If the tutorial training files are not present. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. duct system and a hydronic piping system. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you design a mechanical system for an office building.

3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Space Plan is highlighted. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. click to select it. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. ceilings. click Training Files. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. select Room Bounding. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This makes the architectural components (such as walls. indicating that it’s the active view. roof. under Constraints. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this section.rvt. Next.MEP. not in the MEP training file. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. 1 In the Project Browser. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . These components are defined in the architectural training file. 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click West . NOTE When working with a linked file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and after the linked model highlights. you add a level for plenums.

9 On the Draw panel. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). right-click Level 2 Plenum. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 2600mm. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. and click OK. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. For Offset.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and in the Plan View Types dialog. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. and click Properties. Preparing Spaces | 47 . Click Plan View Types. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 16 Press Esc. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. The new level is placed. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2. and enter Level 2 Plenum.

enter 0. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. enter an Offset of 300mm. NOTE After finishing each exercise. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. you can choose to save your work. and click Apply Default View Template. In the next exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Sub-Discipline. select Level Above (Level 3). for View Scale.Plenum. For Cut plane. you place spaces in areas of the building model. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. for Level. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. However. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Under Identity Data. for View Range. In this exercise. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Under Extents. verify that 1 : 100 is selected. In this exercise. select MEP . click Edit. 20 In the Project Browser. and then place spaces in various types of areas. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and for Offset. for Top. Under View Depth. for Default View Template. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. ■ Click OK twice. For View Classification. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. select Design. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. select Plenum Plan.

rvt. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Space. enter 0. select Horizontal. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. For Offset. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. walls. Placing Spaces | 49 . indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For (Tag Location). select New. and ceilings). select Level 2 Plenum. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model.Space Plan is highlighted.

enter Library. enter 219.7 Click to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. For Name. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. ensuring coordination between the files. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. for Number. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).

Placing Spaces | 51 .15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. For Offset. For Upper Limit. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3.

and then split the space using a space separation line. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. you place a space in a large corridor area. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .22 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing.

enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view. and then press Esc. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Space Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 On the Options Bar. select Level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and for Offset. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. for Upper Limit.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.

8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and select Corridor. click in the name column. In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. and change the space number to 216A. 10 Click in the number column.7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. which was numbered 219Q.

Notice that the tag updates with the number change. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 15 Press Esc twice. as shown. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221.

16 Using the method learned previously. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. place a space in the lower area of the split space. you place a space in a chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 18 Close the file with or without saving it. The new space is numbered correctly (216B).

verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Space Plan is highlighted. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. If necessary. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.rvt. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.

for Upper Limit. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click in the chase area to place the space. expand Spaces. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 10 In the plan view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. and then click OK. select Level 3. for Upper Limit. select the space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the plan view. enter 0.4 Press Esc. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. On the Options Bar. For Offset. right-click. select Interior and Reference. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. select Roof Level. and click Element Properties. 6 Enter VG.

■ For Limit Offset. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Under Identity Data. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. Bounding elements (such as walls. floors. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. for Name. 17 Type ZF. All spaces in the view are tagged. enter 225PC. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and maximize the view. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. enter 1200. enter Chase. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. 15 Press Esc. ceilings. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . For Number. and click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element.

In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone.20 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. click Reference. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click View ➤ Zones. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the next exercises.Zoning is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. To display space reference lines. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. After a space is placed in an area. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. it is automatically added to the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. under Spaces. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. which removes the space from the Default zone.

The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you do this. under Energy Analysis. To display space reference lines. double-click 121 Cafeteria. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and verify the zones in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you assign spaces to a zone. The Zone tool is active. the Edit Zone tab displays. and click OK. ) or 5 In the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Occupiable. click Reference. and a new zone is created. under Spaces. you assign spaces to zones in the building. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt. indicating that the space is occupiable. Next.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). 7 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.Zoning is highlighted.

Using the Edit Zone tab. 5 With the drawing area active. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and Electrical 220 spaces. you can add or remove a space from the zone. and modify the zone properties. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). select Computer Lab 222. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. In the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 4 In the drawing area. Click OK. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). select HVAC Zones. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Instruction 221. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. To view the zone in the drawing area. Instruction. you need to activate the zone visibility. and click Finish Editing Zone.

In this exercise.Zoning view to activate it. enter 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Spaces. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). expand 2 .Zoning. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. for Name. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Area B. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 11 Close the System Browser. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone.rvt. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. To display space reference lines. 9 In the System Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. and verify the zone in the System Browser.West .Zoning is highlighted.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click in the Level 1 . under Identity Data.West . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Finish Editing Zone.

Select Attached End.Zoning view. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 15 Press Esc. zoom out.Zoning view.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 8 In the Level 1 . 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click in the Level 2 . and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . Verify that the distance is 12mm. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.

Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. In this exercise. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. and zone information. space. click the corner where the Top. Front. click Training Files. on the ViewCube.rvt. and select 109 Lounge. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. enter Lounge . and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C. verify that Wireframe is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name Value.Zoning to make it the active view. and click OK. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. you verify the building. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . 19 Close the file with or without saving it. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). double-click the zone tag. double-click Level 1 . under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Zoning view.East.

Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Using the Highlight tool. ■ Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ ■ On the Details tab. you isolate the space. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. With 109 Lounge selected.The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. click (Isolate). Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select 1_South_Area C. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.

22 °C : N/A is specified. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and dehumidification set point. For Cooling Information. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 23. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. and air changes per hour.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. select Lounge/Recreation. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. the space information displays for the selected space. click (Shading). Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. and click OK. and then click OK.33 °C : 12. verify that <Building> is selected. heating air temperature. ■ ■ ■ Next. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. For People. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. verify that 21. verify that <Building> is selected. and in the People dialog. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. This indicates the heating set point. This indicates the outdoor air per person. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Next. scroll down in the left pane. For Electrical Loads. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. For Heating Information. Below the list of spaces and zones. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. cooling air temperature. outdoor air per area. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. click . select 109 Lounge. the zone information displays for the selected zone. click . For Construction Type. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point.22 °C : N/A is specified. Next. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and humidification set point. and then click OK.11 °C : 32. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. roofs. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 15 In the Project Browser. open MEP . 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. enter 0. and other room-bounding components. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 12 Using the methods learned previously. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. floors. For Offset. select Level 3. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. click Cancel. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls.

and verify that the space has replaced the void. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. and select space Plenum 212P. Click OK. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. Because this is an unoccupied space. select Plenum. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. enter 212P. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. In this exercise. for Number. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. you verified building. space. For Name. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). Under Energy Analysis. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and zone information. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate.Space Plan. double-click Level 2 . 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. On the Weather tab. click Training Files. verify that New Construction is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that <Building> is specified. If. click Edit. For Ground Plane. this option adjusts the times automatically. In order to select a space. and click OK. for Energy Data. for Building Service. For Location. For Sliver Space Tolerance. 8 In the drawing area. and click Element Properties. For Postal Code. On the Place tab. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. enter 03101. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. and click OK. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). under Energy Analysis. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Manchester. select space Library 219. For Export Complexity. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that 300 is specified. For Project Phase. for City. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. you need to select this option. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. For Building Construction. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. NH. is selected. right-click. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. Click OK twice. select School or University. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m.rvt. under Volume Computations. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click in the Value field. verify that Level 1 is selected.

Under Power. For Space Type. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. For Building Construction. both. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). For People. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. click Edit. for Values. verify that <Building> is specified. and click to learn the cause for the warning. for Values. verify that Manchester. Select the space associated with the warning. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. For Latent. or neither. m. for Values. select Actual. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. is specified. Under Heat Gain (per Person). and then click . enter 45 W. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Specified. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. a cooling load. You have verified the building information. for Values. For Condition Type. Next. and enter 15 sq. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Edit. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. enter 60 W. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location. verify that School or University is selected. select Library . Select Area per person. For Building Service. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. 12 Click the Details tab. select Specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected.Audio Visual. Click OK twice. select Heated and cooled. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. Click OK. For Sensible. click in the Value column.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and click OK. NH. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify that Occupiable is selected.

11°C. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and under Heating Information. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. and click OK. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. There should be no warnings displayed. and zone information for the building model. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. or make any changes to the model. 21 Click OK. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. click Information). Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. 17 In the loads report. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Calculate. select 219 Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. weather. In this exercise. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. select 219 Library. 16 After you review the loads report. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 19 In the drawing area. space. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 15 Review the loads report for project. space. and a loads report displays. under Energy Analysis. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model.Space Plan. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. and can be modified here. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 .click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. or zone information. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations.

verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Zoom in to the legend. select HVAC Zones. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the drawing area. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Color Scheme. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. in relatively small increments.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Click OK.rvt. click to the right of the building to place the legend.

select Cooling Load . select the color scheme legend. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. under Schemes. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Expanded Ranges. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. and click OK.Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view.

11 Using the method learned previously. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In this exercise. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. In the next exercise.rvt.

■ Click Calculated Value. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. For Name. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the Schedule Properties dialog. select HVAC. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. For Phase. Select Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click (Browse). the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Air Flow. For Formula. For Discipline. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. for Formula. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. more category options are available. enter . for Select available fields from. enter Airflow Delta. enter Space Airflow Schedule. Select Schedule building components. In the Fields dialog. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. Click OK. Under Available fields. For Type.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Space Fill is the active view. and then click . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . select Spaces. select Calculated Supply Airflow.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. select Spaces. select New Construction. Click OK.

select Level.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and Blank line. select red. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Then by. Click OK twice. For Value. and then select Hidden field. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . ■ The schedule displays. and click OK. select Number. select Airflow Delta. Under Conditions to Use. Header. click the color swatch. Select Ascending. a view opens that contains the selected space. In the Color dialog. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. select Not Between. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. verify that Show is highlighted. For Fields. and then click Conditional Format. For Background Color. select Level. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. right-click to access schedule properties. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it.

78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 7 Close the file with or without saving it. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In this exercise. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson.

In this lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After system creation. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you modify air terminal parameters. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. you will create supply air systems. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. 79 . As you place the air terminals. Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. and work with the airflow schedule. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP).

and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m.rvt. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 3 In the ceiling view. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. When you highlight a space using the cursor.

and press Enter. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . click Place on Face. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 15 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor down. and then press Esc to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. as shown. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. enter 215 L/s. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. the hosted elements are updated as well. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. for Flow. The schedule updates with the new flow data. and press Enter. type 3600. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 13 On the Options Bar. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select M_Supply Diffuser . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. If the host element is modified or moved. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Also. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. select the diffuser. verify that Constrain is cleared.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down.

click Place on Face. select one of the diffusers. as shown. 25 In the drawing area. click Yes. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. 29 Place 2 diffusers. clear Leader. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . 24 In the Open dialog. 28 On the Placement tab. and click Open. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select each of the 5 supply diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. As you place the return diffusers. Next. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 22 In the drawing area. 21 On the Options Bar.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s.rfa.

31 In the alert dialog. and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. Level. click Yes. as shown. select Strong Reference.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. and click to select the lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 32 In the Project Browser. for Reference. select one of the return diffusers. under Other.

click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. and then press Esc twice. 43 Using the same method. as shown. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. align the other return diffuser. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan. select the vertical grid line as shown. 40 In the drawing area. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge.

right-click. 47 Using the same method. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. enter 310 L/s. under Mechanical. As you place the air terminals. and on the Options Bar. and click Element Properties. and click OK. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. select both return diffusers. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. and press Enter.44 While pressing Ctrl. clear LeftArrow. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. for Flow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog.

the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 9 On the Options Bar. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1 . When you highlight a space using the cursor. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 2 On the View Control Bar. 10 In the drawing area. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that Tag on Placement is selected. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115.HVAC Plan . 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 8 In the Type Selector. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. expand HVAC . select M_Supply Diffuser . 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. at the lower left corner of the building.Design to make it the active view.200 Neck. click 1 : 100.

If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. By copying the diffuser. enter 2400. for Offset. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. 11 Select the diffuser. move the cursor down. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. type 6000. Under Mechanical . 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 15 Press Esc. enter 170 L/s. Click OK. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. As a result. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. and then press Enter. Also. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Constraints. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. for Flow. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed.

and then press Esc. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar.16 Using the same method.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Mark. and then right-click in the schedule. 26 Using the method learned previously. under Other. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule. it is a negative value. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. for Sort by. under Available Fields. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. select 21. Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. double-click System Type. under space 115. Next. Mark. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 29 Using the same method. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. and click View Properties. Type. and press Enter. enter 210 L/s. tile the windows. for Embedded Schedule. for Flow. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. For Category. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 25 Click OK 3 times. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. type. select Air Terminals. and Flow. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. click Edit. 27 In the schedule. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). mark. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 .Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range.

31 In the drawing area. pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space.Design. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. as shown.HVAC Plan .The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone. As you highlight the zone. and maximize Level 1 . Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule.

verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW.Horizontal .43 W (approximately 1. zoom and pan to the double door for space 115.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. and under Energy Analysis.High Efficiency . 33 Click OK. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. select M_WSHP . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.3 times the heating load). 36 In the drawing area. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 35 In the Type Selector.7-18 kW . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .

for Constraints ➤ Offset. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.rvt. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click Training Files. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. However. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 6 Keep the System Browser open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . indicating that it’s the active view. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. When you highlight a space. right-click the title. the space crossing lines display. As you add diffusers to systems. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click View ➤ Systems. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. You then create the logical connection between the system components. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. After creating the logical connection. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. and click OK. including energy analysis. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. enter .Design is highlighted. IMPORTANT In the System Browser.

These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. the air terminals are the children. 18 Click OK. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. and the system connects them. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Click Cancel. review the Number of Elements. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. Connect Into. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 17 Using the method learned previously. System Name. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. On the Options Bar. the number of elements is updated. and Flow value. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 .

for Mark. for System Name. under Mechanical. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 26 Click Finish Editing System. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection.rvt. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. click Training Files. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Identity Data.Rename the system Next. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. In this exercise. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. which updates the name in the System Browser. In this exercise. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 22 Click OK. 25 Click OK. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 7 On the Options Bar. For Flex Duct Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 5 On the Options Bar.HVAC Plan. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . and display solution 1. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. click Settings.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . For Duct Type.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Round. indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays. For Offset. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Design is highlighted. In this case. enter 3000. for Solution Type. Also. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. enter 3000. select Network. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. 4 In the drawing area. the Network type provides several solutions. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select the upper left diffuser. For Offset. which provides various layout tools. the space crossing lines display. For Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. Select Branch. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

or offset elevations are incorrect. 11 Click Finish Layout. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. as is the elbow itself. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. For example. as shown. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. select a different layout solution. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. Click OK. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the duct. click Modify. enter 900. you’ll get an error in a later step. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.

Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. for Color Scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. fittings. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. and equipment. The first time you press Tab. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. highlight a segment of the main duct.Flow. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . You can delete ductwork and the system remains. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. If the entire network does not highlight. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. thus it is not part of the system.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select Duct Color Fill . and click OK. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Usually. a disconnection exists. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. and click to select it. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.

decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. and then click OK. and on the Options Bar.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select By View. for Flow. select one of the diffusers in the system. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). under Mechanical . for Values Displayed. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Airflow. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. and press Enter. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. select the WSHP. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. under Graphics. but not all values are used in this view. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. highlight a segment of the duct. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. and select 400. select Friction. 26 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. click Cancel. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.65 Pa/m. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. for Schemes. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . Select Only. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. and then press Esc to clear the selection.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. Click OK. select Calculated Size Only. and then click to select it. select the color scheme legend. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area.Velocity. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Branch Sizing. and drag it to the right. select Duct Color Fill . Under Constraints. and enter . Select Restrict Height.

pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. static pressure. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. 33 Move the cursor over the system components.The ductwork and fittings are updated. Using this tool. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and pressure loss. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system.

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 35 Click Finish. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. click Training Files.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.NOTE As you inspect a system. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. also known as the critical path. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct.

indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .HVAC Plan . and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and select the WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel.

select the top right diffuser. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . click the corner where the Top.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 15 On the ViewCube. for Offset.3D MEP. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. and click Draw Duct. right-click the connector grip. enter 3000. NOTE When drawing duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. 11 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. double-click MEP . Front. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct.

20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. in space 115. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 19 In the drawing area. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The ductwork is automatically created.Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.

A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. 25 Press Esc. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. You can ignore the warning. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and select the top left diffuser.

32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 30 Press Esc twice. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. and then click Modify.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. clear Restrict Height. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. and click to select it.Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical . for Flow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and click OK.Airflow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. 40 Using the same method. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. such as a plenum. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . select a segment of the main duct. and then click OK. under Constraints.

108 .

You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Then. Create return and supply piping systems. Automatically and manually lay out piping. on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you place mechanical equipment. and a cooling tower located on the roof. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. In this lesson. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. including 2 base mounted pumps. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. 109 .

Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.7-18kW .rvt. as shown. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m. in corridor 328.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Horizontal High Efficiency .Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Left Return . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click Training Files. Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. and select M_WSHP .

NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. click the dimension. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. click the top edge of the WSHP. verify that Wall faces is selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 7 On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 10 Select the WSHP. 8 Click the corridor wall face. and enter 600.

) 14 Click Modify. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and in the Type Selector. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.11 Press Enter and then press Esc. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. verify that the WSHP is still selected.

enter 0. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. and click to place it in the mechanical room. as shown. Under Mechanical. for Offset. enter 2750. 21 Click Modify. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. Click OK. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.75 L/s. for Water Flow. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.

This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components. but without a corresponding system.22 Close the file with or without saving it. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. including flow and pressure. Unlike logical connections (systems). analyses cannot be performed.

Creating a Piping System | 115 . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. click Training Files. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. Assigning a system component to an existing system. Therefore. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. indicating that it’s the active view. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the System Browser. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. select the 2 WSHPs. where it is easier to review the information.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and click View ➤ Piping.Mech 330). right-click the Systems column heading. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m. As you assign equipment to systems. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. This display indicates that the system is selected. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Design is highlighted. while pressing Ctrl.

(You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 10 On the Options Bar. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. and the Edit System tool is not active. 13 Click Finish Editing System.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. for System Name. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 17 On the Options Bar. for System Name. select the boiler. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. You have created the hydronic return system. 12 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Notice that on the Options Bar. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.

and click OK. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. 19 In the Project Browser. 23 Close the roof plan view.Design. double-click Roof .18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 26 Click Finish Editing System. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 25 Select the boiler. Creating a Piping System | 117 .HVAC Plan . the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and bypasses the cooling tower. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. and select the cooling tower. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. In heating mode. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

and click Expand All. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. and click OK. enter 0. 28 Using the same method. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. and click OK. under Mechanical. 29 Right-click CHWS. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you can view several parameters. and click Column Settings. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. indicating the logical connection. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. In the System Browser. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Select. 32 In the System Browser. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click Properties.8. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. for Water Flow. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise.

3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). click Check None. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. press Tab to highlight the system. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 5 In the Filter dialog. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. you can place the cursor over a system component.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. the boiler. select Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted.Mech 330). IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. A system preview displays in red. then the Select a System dialog displays. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 .rvt. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. Notice that all components within the Level 3 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. and click to select it. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view.

For Inset. enter 450. verify that Solutions is selected. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations.9 In the Select a System dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click Settings. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. select CHWR. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. or architectural components. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select Perimeter. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. structural beams. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. duct. 13 Click Cancel. 10 Click OK. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. It does not reference the architecture.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network.16 Click Finish Layout. With each Tab. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. the flow for each WSHP is 0. 17 Optionally. to display the path with thinner lines. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. 18 Place the cursor over the piping.75 L/s. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and press Tab 3 times. 19 In the drawing area. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.

20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 22 Select the boiler.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. under Mechanical. and click OK. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. and access its instance properties. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 1.50 L/s.75 L/s). 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. 24 Press Esc.

29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. click Edit System. 27 On the System Tools panel. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . Logically. the Number of Elements is now 8. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. On the Options Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

50 L/s. so the total flow of 6. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. access its instance properties. and click Cancel. 38 Using the same method. as shown. 35 Using the drag control. Next. note that the value for Flow is 4. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below.94 L/s. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . which propagates flow throughout the system. under Mechanical. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. you physically close the CHWR loop. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe.44 L/s.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1.94 L/s. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.

enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 40 In the Select a System dialog.Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. enter 0. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select CHWS. Click Settings. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution.00%. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). enter 450. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. select a WSHP. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . 41 Click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5. For Slope. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. For Inset. and then click OK. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.

The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. 48 While pressing Ctrl. In a later exercise. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. (Both sections are at the same elevation. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Modify.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown.

You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. or offset elevations are incorrect. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution. To create the piping system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . or manually modify the pipe. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. 51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Either relocate the system components. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. 50 Using the same method. as shown.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ 3D Views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. As you work in the training file. double-click 3D Building. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan . and the return pipes are magenta.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .

select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 6 Press Delete. as shown. 7 In the plan view.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the boiler. You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

and the boiler is connected to the return piping. select the return pipe riser. 12 In the 3D view. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. and click OK. select the boiler. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps.11 In the Select Connector dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and click Draw Pipe. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. The connections are automatically created.

and you select 1 connector. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. enter 381. enter 600. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. ■ Move the cursor down. and press Enter. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. for Offset. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.In a plan view.

and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . As you place piping runs that are close together. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 18 Press Esc twice. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 19 In the plan view. select the primary base mounted pump.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. you select the tee fitting. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. and select it. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and click to draw the pipe. and click the minus symbol. as shown. and click Draw Pipe.

and when the connector point displays.27 Move the cursor to the right. click to connect to the pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 29 If necessary. select the primary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. enter 1200. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 31 On the Options Bar. right-click the discharge connector.28 Press Esc. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. for Offset.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically.33 Press Esc.

and click Draw Pipe. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. right-click the bottom control on the tee. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.

for Offset. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.■ Move the cursor down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . enter 2850. and press Enter. type 300. and click to create the pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

Next. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you validate the flow through the system.37 Click Modify. You now have a closed loop system.

and click OK.22 L/s (1/2 of 6. under Mechanical. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 46 Press Esc. and click Element Properties. which is rounded up to 3. and click Element Properties. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 43 Press Esc.50 or 50% of the Flow. Connect the cooling tower Next. under Mechanical. 41 Using the same method. 40 Click Cancel. notice that Flow is 6. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog.44 L/s). The flow is being propagated through the piping. In the Instance Properties dialog. the value is 0 L/s. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe.44 L/s. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. right-click. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 44 In the 3D view. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 42 Click OK. right-click. When you create the pumps in parallel. select the cooling tower. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. view the properties for the secondary pump. notice that under Mechanical. as shown.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. 48 In the plan view.

■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). ■ Lower pipe (outlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

44 L/s. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 . 50 In the 3D View. select the cooling tower. and close the dialog.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.

You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the water bypasses the cooling tower. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. and is heated by the boiler. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m. Adding Valves In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design is highlighted. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.52 Close the file with or without saving it. When the valve is open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.

The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 8 Press Esc twice. Adding Valves | 145 . and select M_Ball Valve . 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.4 On the Options Bar.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

10 Press Esc. parallel to the previously placed valve. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 14 Using the same method.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another M_Ball Valve .

verify that Flow is 0 L/s. and click OK. validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Adding Valves | 147 . Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. and click Element Properties.44 L/s. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. 19 Using the same method. validate that the Flow is 6. under Mechanical. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.

You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 20 Select the bypass valve. validate that the Flow is 6. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.44 L/s. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and select M_Ball Valve .44 L/s. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. and select M_Ball Valve . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. click Training Files. Initially.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m. In heating mode.

Design is highlighted. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Flow.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. Sizing Pipe | 149 . 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Size. and click OK. and click OK. as shown. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values.HVAC Plan . select Pipe Color Fill . Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. for Schemes. click Pipe Color Fill . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.

and for Velocity. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 13 Press Esc. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Either relocate the system components. Select And. or manually modify the pipe. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. enter 1. Click OK. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Under Constraints. select a different layout solution. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. select Friction. for Branch Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m.5 m/s. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. and click to select the branch. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow.Design ➤ 3D Views. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system.rvt. Using the System Inspector. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. Inspecting the System In this exercise.14 Close the file with or without saving it. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and double-click 3D Building. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Inspecting the System | 151 . 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure.

the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. and pressure information including pressure loss. flow. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. This information helps you modify the system design. as shown. as required. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. An inspection flag reports the section number.

3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125.rvt. for Fluid Temperature. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.Design. Warnings display. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.HVAC Plan . and to size pipe. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. 9 Using the same method. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834.1 Pa. and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. and the Pressure Loss is 7160. inspect Section 6 again. In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and double-click Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. select 32° C. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . you need to validate them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Click Finish. the Static Pressure is 41916.0 L/s. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m.4 Pa.Note that the Flow is 1.7. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.

For example. After you assign components to a system.Design. and select Level 3 . notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click Hydronic Return. TIP If you have multiple views open. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Expand All. 6 In the Project Browser. As you learned when placing components. right-click the Systems titlebar. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Show to view all of the system components. otherwise. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. thus assigning the components to a system. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. If you place components without assigning them to a system. and confirm unassigned system components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. click Close. 9 Right-click CHWS. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. In the System Browser. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). double-click Level 1 .NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. 4 In the System Browser. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.HVAC Plan . and for pipe sizing.Design floor plan.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. 10 Using the same methods. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and click View. 12 In the System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. expand the Unassigned folder. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. After you have assigned all components to systems. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. 7 In the System Browser.

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. 14 Using the methods that you learned.13 Right-click CHWR.

156 .

Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 157 .

158 .

Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

click (Open). enter THHN. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Wiring Types. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ ■ For Material. distribution systems. Click OK. speeding up the design phase. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m. click Training Files. You also add a wiring type. wiring. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. In this exercise you review electrical settings. expand Wiring . Select Correction Factor.rvt. and demand factors that are applied in the design.Wire Sizes. enter 70. For Material. For Temperature. As you place components and create circuits. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane.04. select 90. select Copper. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ Click New Correction Factor. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select Copper. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. For Factor.

select 10000 VA. select Distribution Systems. select Single. select 120. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. enter 220. For Value. select Steel. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range. For Maximum. select Hot Conductor Size. For Minimum. enter 1. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. enter 2000. select 75. enter 240. enter 120/240. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Click Split. select 240. For Insulation. For Phase. select 3. For L-L Voltage. enter 240.0. enter 250. enter 50. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For Wires. For Conduit Type. select Voltage Definitions. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. Under More Than. select Power. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. For Neutral Size. For L-G Voltage. select Demand Factors. For Max Size. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating. For Neutral Multiplier. Select Neutral Required. Click OK. select THHN.

restrooms. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Later in the tutorial.Lighting Plan. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . click (Open). and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. select Spaces. you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. because the key is linked to your new project parameter.rvt. you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building.Lighting group in the space element properties. click Training Files. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. such as offices. and double-click Level 2 . Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. Verify that Instance is selected. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Required Lighting Level. Under Categories. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 5 In the drawing area. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser. For Group Parameter Under. Click OK twice. under the Electrical . In this case the key style is the type of space and. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. select Electrical. For Discipline. For Type of Parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and conference rooms. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Add. then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. select Illuminance.Lighting. select Electrical . You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).

17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. double-click Required Lighting Level. under Available Fields. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. and click OK. and for Key Name. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. under Electrical . enter Lighting Levels. Click OK. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. select Spaces. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings.Lighting. For Name. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter 485. Select Schedule Keys. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Space Lighting Requirements. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. enter Open Office.

select Required Lighting Level. 21 Click OK twice. 22 Using the same method.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . click Edit. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. which is mapped to project units.Lighting Plan. 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that as you enter the data. for Sorting/Grouping.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type. Select Blank Line. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. change the sort order back to the default setting.

click (Open). that Required Lighting Level is blank. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Note that under Electrical-Lighting. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. Later in this exercise. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. for Lighting Levels. which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. under Identity Data. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. the value input applies only to the selected space. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. 27 Click OK. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. In this exercise. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Instruction-Standard.

If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. for Category. For example.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify the By Range is selected. and press ENTER. and press ENTER.00. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. click Training Files. ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx. enter Required Lighting Levels. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. and click (Add Value). For Color. then the new value will be 400 lx. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes.00 lx. click (Duplicate). and click (Add Value) five times. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ Click OK. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. and in the At Least column. for Title. and click OK to dismiss the alert message.00. for Name. enter 900. Under Schemes.00 lx. enter 200. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Spaces. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. enter 800. enter Required Lighting and click OK. Select the scheme for 500 lx. click (Add Value) again. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. Select the scheme for At Least 20. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200. 00 lx still selected. select Required Lighting Level.rvt.00 lx. and press Enter. Select the scheme for 450.

11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Spaces. and double-click Level 2 . select Spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 13 Click Calculated Value. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. For Type. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 8 In the drawing area. enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. enter Lighting Delta. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Required Lighting. for Available Fields. For Color Scheme. select Illuminance. Name.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. and Required Lighting Level. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Average Estimated Illumination. For Name.Lighting CF. Level. double-click Number. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . select Electrical. For Discipline.

■ For Formula. and click Browse. for Fields. On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click Background Color. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. for Sort by. For Value. for Custom Colors. type a hyphen. under Condition. for Test. Click OK twice. Select Header. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. select Not Between. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click OK three times. select Lighting Delta. select Level. select Red. Click Conditional Format. Click OK. press the spacebar. Select Blank Line. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Formula. select Average Estimated Illumination. select Required Lighting Level. click Browse. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 . 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

power circuits. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. as you place lighting fixtures. First. 171 . and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. Then. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Create a panel schedule. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels.

By using orange as the color for this range. for the Spaces Category. In the Color dialog. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . select the color for Less Than 200 lx. 8 In the Project Browser. Click OK.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. for Basic Colors.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. select Average Estimated Illumination. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. You can create additional color schemes.Lighting Ceiling plan. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. click Training Files. select the color legend.rvt. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Orange. Under Scheme Definition. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. click (Open).Lighting CF view is open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. zoom to space Library 219. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click the Level 2 . The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated.

16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture.the +/. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated.5 fc range is satisfied. 18 Click to place the fixture.277V. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 20 Select the lighting fixture. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 19 Press ESC to end the command. the fixtures will move accordingly.5 fc range. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. scroll to view space space Library 219. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Under Electrical Loads. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx.00 VA. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. for Apparent Load.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. In the Name dialog. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . enter 162. for Name enter and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.

click the value for Initial Color. for Lamp. Under Electrical. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. ■ Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. enter . Placing Switches. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. specify 15000. select 463T5_S.00 lm. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics.ies and click Open. enter F15. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ Click Apply. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. 9 In space Library 219. Under Photometrics. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. select Luminous Flux. 2 In the drawing area. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click OK. Junction Boxes. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. Placing Switches. you add switches. Under Photometrics. click (Open). and receptacles to your design. click Training Files.rvt. enter . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. In the Select File dialog. select the top center fixture.85. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. for Type Mark. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP.93. select Xenon and click OK. for Ballast Loss Factor. select T5 [HO]. Click OK. click the value for Light Loss Factor. junction boxes. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. click the value for Initial Intensity. Junction Boxes. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. for Color Preset. ■ Under Photometrics.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . 7 Click to place the switch.277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. Junction Boxes. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. The element type M_Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Placing Switches. Select M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.14 Press ESC to end the command.Offset. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. Click OK twice. 21 In the drawing area. note that Apparent Load is set to 0.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click Edit Type. Under Electrical. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. enter 2750. enter JB-1NL. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note the Number of Poles is 1. 15 Select the junction box. for Mark. NOTE When entering values. for Level 2 . In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Expand General. NOTE If necessary. Click OK. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Number of Elements. Expand Electrical. and Receptacles | 187 . 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. right-click and click Column Settings. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. Distribution System. Space Name. Space Number. Select Size. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 23 In the System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. Placing Switches. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Load. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. Junction Boxes. 24 For any column. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. and Voltage.

33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 31 Close the System Browser.

move the cursor along the wall. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Copy and Multiple. 38 Select the receptacle. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. and Receptacles | 189 . 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.

43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down. enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 . 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes.

The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.

main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. In the left pane of the Open dialog.equipment. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files.rvt. and work toward the higher voltage. Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .Surface: 100A. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m.208V MCB . zoom to the space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open).

■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK. 14 Select the panelboard.Loads. enter LP-2B. for Max. for Distribution System. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. for Max. select 480/277 Wye. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Distribution System. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . #1 Pole Breakers. Click OK. select 120/208 Wye. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. enter 20. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . enter 20. 15 On the Options Bar. For Panel Name. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. For Panel Name. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads.480V MCB . 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard .Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 8 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B.

24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. Click OK. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 23 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. 20 In the drawing area. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. 28 Press ESC to end the command. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

33 Select the switch on the right. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Press ESC.

38 Press ESC to end the command. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click Check None. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Training Files. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 42 In the Filter dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Click OK. select Wires. and create permanent wiring.rvt. Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4.39 Using the same method. and for Category. enter 2. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. except without wire. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.Loads. 2 In the drawing area. click (Open). 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Rating. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and Voltage Drop are selected. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and verify that Load. Expand Electrical. Voltage. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Distribution System. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. ■ 16 In the System Browser.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . expand Power. and then expand circuit 1. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. right-click on the Systems heading. Click OK. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel.

under Electrical. Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. Click Tags. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. Click OK. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 22 With the junction box still selected. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 30 Close the System Browser. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. change the Voltage to 277V. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.

34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. For Circuit Number. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. 35 Press ESC to end the command. for Type Mark. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. click below the first one to place it. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . enter FR4. 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. Click OK. click Edit Type. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Click Yes. select Break. under Identity Data. 40 Click OK twice.

rvt. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Click Save. Click OK. select Lighting Fixture Tags. click Training Files.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. click Check None. Click OK. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. for File Name. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. click (Open). 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. 54 Select all of the tags. 57 In the Filter dialog. and click Apply. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. enter a comma. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. 52 In the Save As dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Next you create a switch system. and for Category.rfa.

5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter a. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. for Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Creating a Switch System | 205 . under Electrical Lighting. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.

under Electrical . 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch.Lighting.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. for switch ID. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Click OK. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. enter b. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System.

lighting. and for Category. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. 4 In the Filter dialog. click Training Files. Click OK. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Click OK.rvt. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and click Element Properties. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m.26 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. under Electrical . for Hot Conductors. click (Open). Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select Electrical Fixtures.Loads. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 7 In space Electrical 220. Circuits are used for power. and data systems. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). 2 In the drawing area.

and in the drawing area. and click to select the circuit. select Wiring. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks.rfa. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.13 Select the wire again. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and click Open.

22 In space Electrical 220. select the PP-2B panel. click the connector of the first receptacle. as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Creating Power Loads | 209 . and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 28 In the drawing area. 26 Press Delete. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. in space Instruction 221. as shown. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.

31 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you balance the loads for your design.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.

Finally. Scroll down. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. 1-#10. click Training Files. for Rating.rvt. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. 1-#12. Under Electrical-Loads. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. click Rebalance Loads. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. 1-#10. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Had there been a greater imbalance. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Open. Click OK. 6 Click OK. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. select panel LP-2B. 1-#12. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. enter 30A. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. 3 In the Electrical space. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. the distribution is shifted. 2 In the drawing area. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. After re-balancing loads.

enter 25A. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. and click OK. and click Finish Editing Circuit. under Electrical . click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. for Rating. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. select the transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.Loads.Loads. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 15 Select panel PP-2B. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. enter 40A. for Rating. 14 Close the warning dialog. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. and click OK. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 17 Close the warning dialog. 24 Click Select Panel. Next you create a panel schedule. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. under Electrical . 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

expand Sheets (all). NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. click Training Files. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font Size. and open E601 . you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. for Font Size. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. select Berlin Sans FB. click (Open). for Appearance. The Panel Schedule Report displays. Select PP-2B. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. 10 Click OK twice. enter 5 mm. select Bold and Italic. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report. for Font.Panel Schedules. Under Header Text. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m.rvt. Click OK. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 4 mm. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. Under Body Text.

3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. click (Open). and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select space Lounge 212. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. Expand Unassigned. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. each with a load of 180VA. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. press TAB once. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.

20 On the Options Bar. for Panel. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. zoom to space Electrical 214. 15 In the dialog. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. In the System Browser. select MDP-1. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. Checking Your Design | 215 . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 16 Close the details dialog. under Warnings. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning.

216 .

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

4 In the Name dialog.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. in addition to loading existing families. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. type PVC . 2 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. 219 . 3 In the Type Properties dialog.Vent. and click OK. click Training Files. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. In this lesson. In this exercise. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . right-click PVC .rvt. you create a PVC pipe type. click Duplicate. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. planning is critical to a successful design. Adding a pipe size.Plumbing Plan .Sanitary.Design is open. and verify that Level 1 .

select Sanitary. for Material. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. and click Main.PVC . select Plastic. 22 Click New Size. 25 For Outside. click Training Files.PVC . Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. under Mechanical. 10 On the Selection panel. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Pipe Types. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and open Metric\M_Trap P . 26 Click OK. select None.Vent is listed. 13 In the right panel.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . enter 46. 17 In the left pane. select Tee. select Branch. select Sanitary. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. click Modify. enter -1250. 21 In the right pane.000 mm. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and click OK. 6 Click OK. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . enter 10°. In the Project Browser. for Nominal. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. 15 For System Type.DWV: Standard.Sch 40 . verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Tap. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. enter 45. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. 27 For the new pipe size.rfa. 18 For System Type. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent .006 mm. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. Cross.293 mm. For Offset.PVC . 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Sch 40 . 28 Close the file with or without saving it. PVC . 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV.5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Pipe Settings. enter 54. select M_Tee Sanitary . Tee. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 24 For Inside Diameter. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .

add a hot water heater. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 . and hot and cold water piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. Create the hot water system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. sanitary piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. select one of the components in the system. at the midpoint of the detail lines. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. The base is placed. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . and click OK. A preview of the piping layout displays. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. a toilet. for example. as shown. select Sanitary 107. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

23 For Pipe Type. and click OK. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. select PVC . select PVC .Sanitary. select 100 mm.05%. select Main. select Branch. for Diameter. 27 For Offset. 29 On the Options Bar. 26 For Pipe Type. click Solutions. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. enter -350 mm. enter -350 mm. and for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. The default settings are automatically modified. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. enter 1. and modify it to meet project requirements. for Solution Type. You accept this suggested solution. 30 Click Modify. select Intersections. for Slope. and click Settings. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work.19 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 25 In the left pane. 28 On the Options Bar. enter -1225. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.Sanitary. 24 For Offset. 21 On Options Bar.

and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. 32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

33 In the 3D view. as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. as shown. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . use the ViewCube to orient the view.

37 On the Generate Layout panel. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .36 Using the previous method.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When a fitting is reversed.Overall. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation.

The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. and check the slope control. you continue with the work from the last exercise.

and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line. 5 On the Placement panel. select 560 mmx560 mm .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 On the Element panel. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design is open. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector.Plumbing Plan .Rectangular. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . under M_Lavatory . and verify that Level 1 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Public. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). click Training Files. as shown.rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.

On the Options Bar. select Multiple. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.2. enter 711.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 .

expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Add To System.2. and press Enter to create the third sink. enter 711. 12 In the drawing area. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. 11 In the System Browser. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

as shown. double-click 3D Plumbing . In the System Browser. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal.Overall. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. under Design ➤ Plumbing . click Finish Editing System. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee.16 On the Edit System panel. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 20 Select the fitting. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee.

the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink.22 In the plan view. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).05%. When you press the Spacebar. enter 760 mm. for Offset. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. and click Draw Pipe. for Slope. with the tee fitting selected. 27 Click Modify. press Spacebar. enter 1. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option.

and when the vertical center line displays. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . 29 In the Type Selector. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. select Standard.Sch 40 . under M_Wye 45 Deg Double . 31 Click Modify. click to place the fitting.DWV. 30 In the 3D view. 32 Select the double wye fitting.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

double-click the section head to open the section view.33 With the fitting selected. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. for Offset. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. on the Options Bar. zoom in to the double wye fitting. enter 150 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. you add pipe segments to the double wye. enter 305 mm. right-click the right connector.

43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. and click to place the pipe. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).

right-click the bottom connector. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 49 Using the same method.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. press Spacebar. and click Draw Pipe. and press Esc. enter 150 mm. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. 48 Click Modify. 47 Move the cursor down. 46 In the section view.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 51 In the Type Selector. 54 Click Modify. 52 In the plan view. under M_Trap P . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. select Standard.PVC . 55 In the 3D view. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.DWV. 56 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left.Sch 40 . and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks.

246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. and press Enter. Click Modify. Move the cursor to the left. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. enter 150 mm. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. In the plan view.. select the left P-Trap. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. Click in the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink.

and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. while pressing Ctrl. under Pipe Types. click Finish to select the recommended solution. In the Type Selector. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions.■ In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. while pressing Ctrl. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select PVC Sanitary. and select a proposed solution. Press Esc. select the section of pipe you just drew. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view.

248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope. click Finish. 63 On the Slope Editor panel.05% is selected. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. adjusting the sanitary stack. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.rvt.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. 62 On the Options Bar. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that 1. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. click Training Files.

and click the intersection to place the fitting.Sch 40 . select Standard.Design. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 .Plumbing Plan .DWV. right-click the top connector. and click Draw Pipe. and click to draw the pipe.Design. as shown. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 10 In the 3D view.PVC . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 9 In the Type Selector. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select the vertical stack. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 7 On the Selection panel.Overall.Floor level line. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the tee. click Modify. select the elbow fitting on the right. 3 In the Section view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. click Training Files. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. After finishing each exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can choose to save your work. However.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In this tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. 267 . In this lesson. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. go to http://www. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers.autodesk. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate. 2 Right-click Standard. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems.

select Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. for Material. or architectural components. and then click OK. and click Properties. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and enter Fire Protection Wet. select Main. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . structural beams. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. verify that 2800 is specified. For Offset. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 6 In the Project Browser. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. For Offset. under Mechanical. you create project parameters and work with schedules. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. you modify the type properties of the pipe. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. For System Type. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In this exercise. select Carbon Steel. For Pipe Type. 9 Click OK. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. In the next exercise. In the left pane. For System Type. verify that 2800 is selected. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. duct. However. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. Next. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet.

select the upper half of the building. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m.Design is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. For Group parameter under.rvt. enter Sprinkler Zone. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Under Categories. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 5 Click OK twice. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click Add. and then click OK. select space Instruction 221 as shown. select Spaces. under Fire Protection. for Sprinkler Zone. 8 Using a crossing window. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. for Name. 6 In the drawing area. right-click. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. select Fire Protection. the space crossing lines display.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . enter Zone 1. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . and click Element Properties.Fire Protection Piping Plan . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.

to which you add various parameters. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. and then click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK.rvt. and then click OK. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. under Fire Protection. verify that only Spaces are selected. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. under Fire Protection. you create schedules for sprinkler design. and then access instance properties. click Training Files. enter Zone 2. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m. for Sprinkler Zone. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Zone 1. 10 In the Filter dialog.

3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter Maximum Spacing. click Add Parameter. indicating that it’s the active view. and on the ribbon.Fire Protection Piping Plan . For Name.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click the Formatting tab. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Spaces. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. select mm. select Maximum Spacing.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. For Units. 6 Using the same method. select Fire Protection. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. 14 Select the new header. For Type of Parameter. Select Schedule keys. 9 On the Formatting tab. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. The schedule displays. 7 Click OK. and click Field Format. 10 In the Format dialog. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select 0 decimal places. For Unit symbol. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. For Rounding. Click OK. For Group parameter under. enter Light. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . for Name. select Millimeters. For Key name. select Length. double-click on each column separator. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design is highlighted. 11 Click OK twice. Click OK.

Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. For Name. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. select Spaces. enter 4575. Click OK. enter 40. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 16 Using the same method. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Combustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column. Unobstructed Ordinary. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light.

For Rounding. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. In the Fields dialog. 20 On the Formatting tab. select Fixed. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. select Number. select Minimum Sprinklers. For Units. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 .Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select 0 decimal place. 22 Click OK twice. and click Field Format. For Type. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Click OK. select Area. For Discipline. select Common. Enter the formula operator / after Area. For Formula. click . double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). and click OK. under Available fields.

for Sort by. For Then by. select Number. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . For Fields. select Level. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. and select Totals only. For Fields. Select Header and Blank line. verify that Use default settings is selected. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and click View Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and then select Hidden field. At the bottom of the dialog. select Level. select Sprinkler Zone. click Edit. For Then by (second instance). for Sorting/Grouping. Select Header and Blank line.Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. under Other. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and then click Field Format.

and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. For Category. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select Totals only. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Embedded Schedule. select Calculate totals. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. and Count. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers.27 In the drawing area. select Count. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. right-click the schedule. and click View Properties. for Fields. select Grand totals. click Edit. double-click Type. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Formatting tab. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 30 Click OK twice. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter. for Filter by. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Available fields. System Name. for Embedded Schedule. Under Field formatting. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. and click View Properties.

and click OK. 52 Click OK. Unobstructed. select Light. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. 44 In the schedule. select space 221 Instruction. under Identity Data. select Ordinary. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. but their values are not determined. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Unobstructed. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. under Identity Data. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Protection Area Construction Type. double-click FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . As a result. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 50 Access the instance properties. select space 221 Instruction. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. select Ordinary. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access the instance properties. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 41 In the plan view. 46 With the space still selected. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 48 In the floor plan.Fire Protection Plan Design. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. methodology.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. As you place the sprinklers. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. If the tutorial training files are not present. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. go to http://www. you can choose to save your work. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. As you create the system. However. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.autodesk. In the left pane of the Open dialog. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. click Training Files. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. By following the recommended workflow. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. 279 . you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. At the end of this tutorial. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will understand the process.rvt.

open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. After placing the initial sprinkler. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. When there is a small misalignment.

and click to place 3 sprinklers. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. select the sprinklers that you placed. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 9 In space Instruction 202. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. verify that Constrain is cleared. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and 207. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . while pressing Ctrl. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. Also. 206. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. 11 In the drawing area. 10 Press Esc twice.

16 Close the ceiling plan view. 18 Type WT. Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. you place non-hosted sprinklers. specify a vertical offset. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. as shown. 17 In the Project Browser. 200B.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point.Design. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. Next. you place non-hosted sprinklers.Fire Protection Piping Plan . open Design ➤ FP . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. and then press Esc. and 200C).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. This number is determined in the schedule. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. In this exercise. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. and press Enter. enter 11. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.0. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. 29 Press Esc. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Notice that the schedule updates. you adjust the offset. In the next exercise. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 25 Click OK. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Next. enter 2900 mm. for Offset. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. move the cursor to the right. enter 4100. After creating the logical connection. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. For Number. under Constraints. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. and with piping (physical connection). 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.19 In the floor plan. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . and click Element Properties. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate.FP_Ceiling view. Because the sprinkler is not hosted.

Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Fire Protection Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you assign sprinklers to systems.Design is highlighted. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. However. as shown. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. click Training Files. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Piping.pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. Unlike logical connections (systems). they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click View ➤ Systems. 5 Right-click the header. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

named Fire Protection Wet. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. Next. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. 11 With the system still selected. In the System Browser.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. place the cursor over a sprinkler. within the Piping Systems folder. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. select an initial piping layout. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. press Tab. and select the system. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. indicating the logical connection. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . and click Select. Creating a Piping System | 285 . and assign the selected sprinklers to it.

In the left pane. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. When the layout is finished. enter -3650. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 14 Click Finish Editing System. select Branch. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. For Pipe Type. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2.Wet is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 15 In the drawing area. for Diameter. verify that Main is selected. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. as shown. system equipment.0 is specified. select 150 mm. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 23 For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Solutions. 22 On the Options Bar. click Settings. for System Name. 13 In the System Browser. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 19 Click OK. and number of elements in the system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. click Place Base. enter FP Wet_Zone2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The Generate Layout tools are activated. verify that 2800. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. providing system editing tools.The Edit Piping System panel displays. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and on the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. and a piping layout preview displays. For Offset.

click Modify. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. and select solution 4. A (parallel movement control) displays. and green represents branch lines). In general. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. On the Generate Layout panel. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. verify that Network is selected. Creating a Piping System | 287 . The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.

31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. Either relocate the system components. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select a different layout solution.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP .Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 32 If necessary. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. or that offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

Fire Protection Piping Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 If necessary. indicating that it’s the active view. Next.33 Close the file with or without saving it. 1 In the Project Browser. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 .rvt. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and select the elbow fitting as shown. and various manual pipe creation tools. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and then you create piping to physically connect them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Connect Into tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. click Training Files.

You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. or a system component to display system tools.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 9 On the Edit System panel. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. radiators. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Finish Editing System. and so on) are logically connected by a system. you can select the pipe or duct. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. click Add To System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 8 In the corridor. 5 In the drawing area. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and pipe or duct is created. mechanical equipment. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. air terminals. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system.

for Solution Type. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. verify that Network is selected. 20 Open Design ➤ FP . 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 Close the System Browser. 21 In the Piping Plan. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 13 Click Finish Layout. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. verify that Solutions is selected.11 On the Generate Layout panel. and select solution 5. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 18 Click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 23 View the result in the 3D view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. and then tile the views.

25 Select the sprinkler. for Offset. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 28 In the drawing area. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 27 On the Options Bar. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. select 2800.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe.24 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc. 29 Using the same method. right-click. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint.

and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. 4 On the Options Bar. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.rvt.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. Because the whole system highlights. 31 In the plan view. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise.Fire Protection Piping Plan . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. for Scale. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 1 : 50. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Training Files. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system.

8 Right-click. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area.6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and click View Properties. double-click on the section head to open the section view.

for Sub-Discipline. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. and then right-click the top connector. Click OK. select MEP Section.Design the active view. and then click Modify.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 . Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.Design. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. For Default View Template. 13 Select the elbow fitting. and click Apply Default View Template. enter FP Section_Stair. select FP . 10 In the Project Browser.Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. and press Enter. right-click Design ➤ FP . select Design. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. and select Hose Reel Cabinet . 12 If necessary. 15 Press Spacebar. Under Identity Data.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. 14 Select the tee fitting. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. 17 Move the cursor up. for View Name. drag the top section boundary line up. enter 2135.Fire Protection Plan . and click Draw Pipe. 22 In the drawing area. For View Classification. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection .

27 On the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Verify that Fire Protection . 24 Select the cabinet. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 26 On the Options Bar. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps). verify that Automatically Connect is active. and then click Modify. for Diameter.23 In the section view. right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. select .

34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet.rfa. 31 In the alert dialog. verify that M_Gate Valve . Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. click Yes to load a family.29 Close the section view. 33 In the Type Selector. 32 In the Open dialog. as shown. and then click Modify. and click Open. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe.50 mm is selected.

3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views.rvt. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ 3D Views. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. or height. select 25mm.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. for Diameter. 7 On the Options Bar. and click OK. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). or width. click Check None. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. width. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. height. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. 6 In the Filter dialog. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. Changing the diameter. 8 Click Modify. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 4 In the floor plan view. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. width.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. Press Esc. and after each segment highlights.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 17 On the View Control Bar. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. click to place the tag. 18 In the 3D view. Clear Leader. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. select the linked architectural file. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. By hiding the linked file.rfa. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. NOTE Tags are view specific. 12 If necessary. and click Open. you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. . 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category.

The main piping is selected and displays in red.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 . This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. and when the section highlights. press Tab. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. select 100mm. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points.

and maximize the floor plan. 24 In the drawing area. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. 26 Using the same method. select 40mm. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . The pipe diameter is modified. as shown. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205. 23 Close the 3D view. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view.

use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this exercise. In this tutorial. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. you created a wet fire protection system. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You added tags to pipes. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. For additional practice. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m.

304 .

305 .Documenting a Project In this tutorial. add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details.

306 .

and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. and click Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser.rvt. 307 . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. and click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and apply a view template. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans. matchlines. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you begin the construction documentation for the building project. dependent views. and view references. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. click Training Files. If the view included detail graphics.

The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and then press Esc. views and put them on the sheet. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. In the left pane of the Open dialog. as shown. 4 Using the same method. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click OK. 7 Close the file without saving. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. more focused. and click Apply Default View Template. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click Rename. create dependent views for areas B and C.rvt. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 10 In the drawing area. and click OK. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. click Training Files. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

and then press Esc. 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select black. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. In the Color dialog. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select 11. 13 Press Esc twice.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . For Line Weight. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. For Line Pattern. click the current value. select Double Dash . Click OK.

on the Options Bar. 25 Using the same method. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.20 Select the upper view reference and. as shown. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. for Target view. 21 Using the same method. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A.

For Default View Template. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and select the section box. and click Properties. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . right-click 3D Plumbing. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. select Plumbing Isometric. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 4 In the Project Browser. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 27 Using the same method.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 2 Zoom in. enter Plumbing Isometric . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. and zoom to each of the view references. for View Name.rvt. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203.

and click to select it.■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and then click OK. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. select 3. 10 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and click Apply Default View Template. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.Domestic Water. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 6 In the Project Browser. Click Apply. Click OK. 9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. For Sub-Discipline. for View Classification. select Documentation. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view. select Plumbing. right-click Plumbing Isometric . The section crop lines no longer display.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . 13 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. press Tab 3 times.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click to select it.

and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. as shown). 15 Right-click. and click to select it. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe.

and in the view properties. click on the Format value. select 1. rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline. 19 Using methods learned previously. For Slope.Sanitary Waste.Isometric. verify that Common is selected.5mm Arial. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. and for Default View Template.16 Press Esc. On the View Control Bar. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. specify Plumbing . and in the Type Selector. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . 18 Label the fixtures as shown.

27 Close the file with or without saving it.■ In the Format dialog. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .rvt. and then place the callout view on a sheet. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. for Rounding. indicating that it’s the active view. When the view is associated with a sheet. and click to place the spot slope annotation. select To the nearest 10. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. as shown. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Press Esc twice. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 22 Click OK twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. select 1 : 50. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Creating Callout Views | 317 . for Scale. 5 On the Options Bar.

■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . using the same method. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. select 5. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. and select the viewport. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it.Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . under Sheets (all). 13 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. Click OK. drag it to the sheet.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. and click Apply Default View Template.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. Creating Callout Views | 319 . right-click the callout view. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel.

and click Rename. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 29 Close the file with or without saving it. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click OK. 25 In the Project Browser. and click Apply View Template. under Names.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. right-click the detail view. enter Typical WSHP Detail.

322 .

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m. click Training Files. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. as shown. and annotation to create a legend. work with model-based components. 323 .Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. symbols. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. Creating Annotations In this exercise. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. duct tags. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. linetypes. you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes.rvt.

5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and select 1. 9 Press Esc twice.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 8 With the text still selected. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

13 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Leader is cleared. select a supply diffuser. a segment of round duct. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 16 In the drawing area. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. as shown. and then click Right Straight. a return diffuser. Creating Annotations | 325 .

you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 22 In the Tags dialog. 24 On the Options Bar.17 Click Modify. and click OK.rfa. under Category. 25 In the drawing area. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. click Load. as shown. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 21 In the Load Family dialog. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 20 In the Tags dialog. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. If necessary. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. and click Open. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. for Ducts. clear Leader. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.

open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Creating Annotations | 327 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. Leader.26 On the Options Bar. 32 In the drawing area. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. select Horizontal. and Attached End. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 31 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. select Free End.33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 36 Press Esc twice. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

not simply an instance property. 37 In the drawing area. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 329 . and all elements of that type are affected.rvt. and lock lighting fixtures. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. you use temporary dimensions to locate. select the last tag placed. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 40 Using the method learned previously. That’s because you changed a type property. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. lay out. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. and click OK.

9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 14 Using the same method. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. On the Options Bar. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 12 Click EQ. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 13 Press Esc. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall.

and notes. and offset them from the wall. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. 20 Using the same methods. linework. Creating a Legend | 331 . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. annotation symbols. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. enter 2430. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.9). 17 Press Esc. Because the dimensions are locked. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. and press Enter. click the 3 interior locks on the line.

5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Floor Plan. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. For View. For Scale.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . 10 Using the same method. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. and select 1. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. select 1 : 50. enter Diffuser Legend. 5 Click in the drawing area.200 Neck. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser .Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. Click OK. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

11 Press Esc. Creating a Legend | 333 . 14 In the drawing area. click next to the top diffuser.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. and select 1. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.

23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. The selected detail lines are now thin. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP and its text note. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 While pressing Ctrl. 24 Select the component’s break line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 21 Press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 26 Press Esc. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel.RISE symbol for the copy start point.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.

30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. Creating a Legend | 335 . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.MECHANICAL LEGEND. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. enter E. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify.

336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. 40 Press Esc.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Title w Line . click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. and text. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. A drafting view using detail components.rvt. 337 . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view. detail groups. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing 15 In this lesson. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view.

place Power Riser .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. select each of the 2 panelboards. and click to place it.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and then modify and align the views. 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. 5 In the drawing area. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Using the same method.113 East on the sheet.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. Next. clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click. select the 113 North view.9 Press Esc. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click. and click OK. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Activate View. under Identity Data. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view.

and click Activate View. select the 113 East elevation view. you add wiring to the diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . In the next exercise. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and select Title w Line . 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 Using the drag control. 22 Press Esc. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. as shown.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 19 Select the Level 1 line. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click New.113 North view. 2 Close the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. enter Electrical Power. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. In the New Subcategory dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 9 Beginning at the transformer. Under Modify Subcategories. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. for Name. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 On the Options Bar. for Line Weight. click Training Files.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. As you draw. In the Line Styles dialog. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . select 6. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . as shown. expand Lines. and then click OK. notice that there are no snaps active. and click OK. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

10 Press Esc. as shown. for Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 3mm. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 11 Using the same method.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

28 Click above the cap.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Multiple. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 31 While pressing Ctrl. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and select 1. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 29 Click Modify.

36 Press Esc.35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 42 On the Options Bar. you can ensure that they stay together. and press Enter.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. click on the length dimension value. for Offset. enter 3.0. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Press Esc. and press Enter. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 12. 39 Move the cursor to the right. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. You enter exact values for each line length. enter 7. Using the same method. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. 40 Press Esc.

48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. and click OK. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. expand Groups ➤ Detail. 47 In the drawing area. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . while pressing Ctrl. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 54 Select the group. select all 3 lines. enter Ground. 52 Select the detail group. and then press Esc. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. TP-2B. 46 In the Project Browser. for Name. 51 Using the method learned previously.

In later exercises. and will place it on sheet E01. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport.

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . Back. click Home. and then press Esc. and click Rename. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 8 On the ViewCube.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 6 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click OK. 2 Zoom in to view the section. and then click the corner where the Top. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 In the Project Browser. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. select 3D Views. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. Walkthroughs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and click Apply View Template.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 5 Right-click the copy. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the section box. and Left sides converge.rvt. and double click Typical Make Up Air. for Name.

and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. and click to specify the second leader point. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point.■ ■ Under Names. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Typical.

24 Access the instance properties for the view. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. To rotate and reposition a text label. 23 Click on the crop region. and under Extents. 19 Complete the text labels. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. under Extents. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.18 Press Esc. as shown. and then click OK. as shown. select Crop Region Visible. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail.

and click OK. 33 Right-click the view. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. and click Deactivate View. Use detail lines to create a detail group.rvt. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Activate View. 30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. scroll down. and click View Properties. 32 In the Instance Properties. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. Place a detail component. click Training Files. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 29 Right click the view.25 Click OK. select Crop View and Section Box. and under Extents. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 34 Close the file with or without saving it.

By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click the point at the top of the drain. select Plumbing. as shown.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. select 1 : 5. as the rectangle start point. for Sub-Discipline. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. For Scale. select Documentation. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). right-click the view name. and click Properties. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Click OK. 12 On the Element panel. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. For View Classification. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 9 Zoom in to the component. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 3 In the Project Browser. and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel.

Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 18 With the filled region still selected. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. select C. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. and then press Esc. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog.P. Concrete. 22 Click Modify.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. 20 Select 1.I. and click OK. 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. for Type. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 21 In the drawing area.

Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 28 Click Modify. (Line). press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 34 Press Esc. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 23 In the drawing area. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. select the filled region. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. and then click to select them. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 40 Click Finish Region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then select the side of the slab above the line.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then press Esc. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab.

49 Click Modify. for Name.Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Flashing Membrane_F. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. (Rectangle). 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. 45 Using the method learned previously. select the Flashing Membrane group. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. and click OK. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. as shown..D. draw wide detail lines as shown. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area.

55 Press Esc. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out.54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 61 Using the same method. as shown. as shown. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . press Spacebar twice.

and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing .62 Press Esc twice. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 64 Press Esc twice. select Leader and Free End. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. as shown.

select 15000 (Division 15 . and click to specify the second leader point. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and click to specify the text insertion point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 80 Press Esc twice. 71 Click Modify. 81 Select the text note.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. 72 If necessary. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and then click OK.

as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.82 Continue annotating the detail. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 90 Press Esc.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . select the view title. and click to place it.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. open P103 . 88 In the drawing area.

364 .